Printed in the U.S.A.
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Ram is a re
gistered trademark of FCA US LLC. Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2020
RAM PROMASTER CITY
RAM promaster city
2020
20_VM_OM_EN_USC
RAM PROMASTER CITY
FIRST Edition
Owner’s Manual
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the baery and fused as close to the baery as
possible. The negative power connection should be made
to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative baery
connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be
used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets
may aect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible
interference between the communications equipment
and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or o-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals inclu-
ding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as ne-
cessary, service your vehicle in a well-ven-
tilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If
you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public
transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation
of features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described
in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Copyright © 2019 FCA US LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the baery and fused as close to the baery as
possible. The negative power connection should be made
to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative baery
connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be
used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets
may aect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible
interference between the communications equipment
and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or o-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals inclu-
ding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as ne-
cessary, service your vehicle in a well-ven-
tilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If
you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public
transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation
of features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described
in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Copyright © 2019 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................................................10
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .........................................................................................................................................13
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ................................................................................................................75
4 SAFETY ...................................................................................................................................................................................................97
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ......................................................................................................................................................157
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..............................................................................................................................................................199
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................................................241
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................................294
9 MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................................................................................................................................305
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................................................................329
11 INDEX ....................................................................................................................................................................................................335
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION ..............................................................10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .......................................11
Essential Information....................................................11
Symbols...........................................................................11
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .......................................12
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS ................................12
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ...........12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS .....................................................................................13
Key Fob ...........................................................................13
To Lock The Doors ........................................................15
Sound Horn With Lock.................................................15
Key Fob Battery Replacement......................................15
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........................16
General Information......................................................16
IGNITION SWITCH ..........................................................17
Ignition Key Removal .................................................17
Key-In-Ignition Reminder ...........................................18
SENTRY KEY .....................................................................19
Replacement Keys ........................................................19
General Information......................................................20
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .........21
To Arm The System.......................................................21
To Disarm The System..................................................21
Rearming Of The System..............................................21
Security System Manual Override ..............................21
DOORS .................................................................................22
Door Locks .....................................................................22
Sliding Side Door...........................................................24
Child Lock System.........................................................27
Double Rear Swing Doors ............................................28
SEATS ................................................................................29
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) ...............................30
Heated Seats — If Equipped ........................................32
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped................................33
HEAD RESTRAINTS .........................................................34
Front Adjustment...........................................................35
Rear Adjustment............................................................35
Front Removal................................................................36
Rear Removal .................................................................37
STEERING WHEEL ............................................................38
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...........................38
MIRRORS ............................................................................38
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ..................38
Outside Mirrors .............................................................39
Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped .....................41
Vanity Mirror .................................................................42
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..........................................................43
Multifunction Lever ......................................................43
Headlights .....................................................................43
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped ..................43
High Beams ....................................................................44
Flash-To-Pass ................................................................44
Parking Lights ...............................................................44
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay ...........................44
Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........................................45
Turn Signals....................................................................45
Lane Change Assist.......................................................45
INTERIOR LIGHTS ............................................................46
Courtesy/Interior Lights..............................................46
WIPERS AND WASHERS ..............................................50
Front Wiper Operation .................................................50
Rear Wiper Operation — If Equipped........................52
CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................................................53
Manual Climate Control Overview ............................53
Climate Control Functions ...........................................56
Operating Tips ...............................................................57
WINDOWS ..........................................................................60
Power Windows — If Equipped ................................60
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped............................63
Wind Buffeting ..............................................................63
HOOD ...................................................................................64
Opening...........................................................................64
Closing.............................................................................65
CARGO AREA FEATURES ............................................66
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs ................................................66
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT .................................................68
Storage.............................................................................68
Cupholders ....................................................................69
Power Outlets ................................................................70
ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED .........................................72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER..................................................75
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .................................76
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...............................77
Location And Controls..................................................77
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped ...........................80
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items....................80
TRIP COMPUTER ...............................................................82
Trip Button......................................................................82
Trip Functions ...............................................................83
Values Displayed...........................................................83
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 3
4
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..........................84
Red Warning Lights ......................................................84
Yellow Warning Lights.................................................88
Green Indicator Lights..................................................92
Blue Indicator Lights.....................................................93
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II.............94
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .................................................................94
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS .......................................................................95
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................97
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............97
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ....................98
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS..................................103
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .............103
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........................108
Occupant Restraint Systems ......................................108
Important Safety Precautions ....................................108
Seat Belt Systems ........................................................109
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ....................120
Child Restraints .........................................................133
Transporting Pets .....................................................153
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................................153
Transporting Passengers ............................................153
Exhaust Gas ..............................................................153
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ..................................................................154
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...................................................................156
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ..............................................157
Automatic Transmission.............................................157
Normal Starting ...........................................................157
Cold Weather Operation ...........................................158
Extended Park Starting...............................................158
If Engine Fails To Start ..............................................158
After Starting................................................................159
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED .............159
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ............160
PARKING BRAKE ...........................................................161
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ....................................163
Key Ignition Park Interlock ........................................164
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System............164
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ......................164
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 4
5
POWER STEERING .........................................................171
Power Steering Fluid Check ......................................171
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .............................172
To Activate ...................................................................172
To Set A Desired Speed ..............................................173
To Vary The Speed Setting.........................................173
To Accelerate For Passing ..........................................174
To Resume Speed ........................................................175
To Deactivate ...............................................................175
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................175
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors .........................176
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts............................176
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications......177
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System ...........................................................................178
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions ...................................................................178
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .....................179
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..........................................181
VEHICLE LOADING ......................................................182
Vehicle Certification Label .......................................182
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ...................183
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........................183
Tire Size.........................................................................183
Rim Size.........................................................................183
Inflation Pressure.........................................................183
Curb Weight .................................................................183
Overloading..................................................................183
Loading ......................................................................184
TRAILER TOWING ........................................................184
Common Towing Definitions ....................................184
Trailer Hitch Classification.........................................187
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................................188
Trailer And Tongue Weight ......................................188
Towing Requirements ................................................189
Towing Tips .................................................................193
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................................195
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle ......195
Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission ...... 195
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 5
6
DRIVING TIPS...................................................................196
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...................................196
Driving Through Water .............................................197
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..............................199
BULB REPLACEMENT ..................................................200
Replacement Bulbs ...................................................200
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ............................................201
Replacing Interior Bulbs.............................................203
FUSES..................................................................................206
Underhood Fuses.........................................................206
Interior Fuses................................................................209
Central Unit Fuse Panel..............................................211
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING...............................212
Jack Location — If Equipped.....................................212
Removing The Spare Tire — If Equipped................213
Preparations For Jacking ...........................................217
Jacking Instructions.....................................................218
Vehicles With Alloy Wheels ......................................224
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers ...................226
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ...........................227
Tire Service Kit Storage ..............................................227
Tire Service Kit Usage.................................................227
JUMP STARTING..............................................................231
Preparations For Jump Starting.................................231
Jump Starting Procedure ............................................232
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ..................................234
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE ......................235
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .....................................236
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ......................................237
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...............................238
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ...............................................................240
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).................................240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .............................................241
Maintenance Plan ........................................................242
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ..........................................245
Engine Compartment — 2.4L ....................................245
Checking Oil Level ......................................................246
Adding Washer Fluid .................................................246
Maintenance-Free Battery ..........................................247
Pressure Washing ........................................................248
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 6
7
DEALER SERVICE ...........................................................248
Engine Oil ...................................................................248
Engine Oil Filter .........................................................250
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .........................................250
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................................251
Body Lubrication .......................................................252
Windshield Wiper Blades .........................................252
Exhaust System ...........................................................253
Cooling System ..........................................................255
Brake System ...............................................................260
Power Steering Fluid...................................................261
Automatic Transmission ...........................................261
Upfitter Connectors — If Equipped..........................263
RAISING THE VEHICLE ...............................................266
TIRES...................................................................................266
Tire Safety Information ............................................266
Tires — General Information ....................................276
Tire Types .....................................................................282
Spare Tires — If Equipped .......................................283
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................................285
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .................................287
Tire Rotation Recommendations...............................287
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...............................................288
Treadwear.....................................................................288
Traction Grades............................................................289
Temperature Grades ...................................................289
STORING THE VEHICLE .............................................289
BODYWORK......................................................................290
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ....................290
Body And Underbody Maintenance.........................290
Preserving The Bodywork..........................................291
INTERIORS .......................................................................292
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................................292
Plastic And Coated Parts............................................292
Leather Parts.................................................................293
Glass Surfaces ..............................................................293
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 7
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ...............................................294
Vehicle Identification Number ..................................294
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................................295
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .....295
Torque Specifications..................................................295
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ................................................297
2.4L Engine ...................................................................297
Reformulated Gasoline ............................................297
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................................297
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .....................298
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications................298
MMT In Gasoline.........................................................298
Materials Added To Fuel............................................299
Fuel System Cautions..................................................299
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ....................................300
FLUID CAPACITIES .....................................................301
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..........................................302
Engine .........................................................................302
Chassis .......................................................................304
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................................................305
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................305
UCONNECT SETTINGS .................................................306
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings.......................................307
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................317
Radio Operation...........................................................317
Media Mode..................................................................317
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ......318
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED..............................318
Ram Telematics General Information.......................319
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .........320
Regulatory And Safety Information .........................320
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ..........................322
Introducing Uconnect .................................................322
Get Started ....................................................................322
Basic Voice Commands...............................................323
Radio..............................................................................324
Media.............................................................................325
Phone.............................................................................326
Voice Text Reply ..........................................................327
General Information....................................................327
Additional Information...............................................328
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 8
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ..............................................................329
Prepare For The Appointment ..................................329
Prepare A List ..............................................................329
Be Reasonable With Requests....................................329
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .........................................329
FCA US LLC Customer Center..................................330
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ..........................330
In Mexico Contact........................................................330
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ..........................330
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)....................................331
Service Contract ..........................................................331
WARRANTY INFORMATION.......................................332
MOPAR PARTS.................................................................332
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...................................333
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.......333
In Canada......................................................................333
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...................................333
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 9
10
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling,
and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and
customer-oriented documents located online. Within this
information, you will find a description of the services that
FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty
coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of
these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for
the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations,
tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure
safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Be sure you are
familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for
braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting (if
equipped). Learn how your vehicle handles on different road
surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related to
the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased.
Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Informa-
tion, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will
be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data
contained in this publication are intended to help you use
your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a
constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 10
INTRODUCTION 11
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations
may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose
symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
1
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 11
12 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury
and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van conver-
sion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S. residents
refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C. Canadian
residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the
Warranty Information. Such equipment includes video
monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For
warranty coverage and service on these items, contact the
applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by
the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be
supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are missing,
please contact an authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable
manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimen-
sional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is
intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's technical support.
For service issues, contact an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 12
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and an ignition switch.
The key fob contains an integrated mechanical key. To use
the mechanical key, simply push the mechanical key release
button.
In case you need duplicate keys, please contact an
authorized dealer so that they can order copies for you.
Key Fob With Integrated Mechanical Key
1 — Key Blade Release Button
2 — Driver/Passenger Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle if it
is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
Key Fob
To Unlock The Doors
Cargo Vehicle (Canada) — If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
the front two doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock
button on key fob to unlock the cargo area (side lateral
sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash
to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Cargo Vehicle (United States) — If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
all doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock button on key
fob to unlock the cargo doors. The turn signal lights will flash
to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Passenger Vehicle
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
all doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock button on key
fob to unlock the cargo doors. The turn signal lights will flash
to acknowledge the unlock signal.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
signal. If a door is open, the turn signal lights will flash at an
increased rate. This is to indicate that a door is still open.
Horn activation settings after a Radio Frequency (RF) lock
command can be adjusted manually. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Locking Doors With A Key
1. Insert the key with either side up.
2. Turn the key to the right to lock the door.
3. Turn the key to the left to unlock the door.
Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for maintenance procedures.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the
mechanical key to access the battery case screw located on
the side of the key fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key fob using
a small screwdriver.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob Screw Location
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the battery
observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
re-purposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the gear selector in PARK.
2. Rotate the key to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver's door when the key is in the ignition and
the ignition switch position is STOP (OFF/LOCK) sounds a
signal to remove the key.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission
into PARK, apply the parking brake, and remove the
key fob from the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle,
always lock your vehicle. In case you switch off the
vehicle and the transmission is not in PARK position, a
warning message will appear on the cluster which
suggests you to shift the transmission into PARK posi-
tion and, then, you can remove the key within 15
seconds. If 15 seconds expire, you have to rotate the key
from OFF/LOCK position to ON/RUN position and
come back to OFF/LOCK position in order to remove
the key.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles
in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove the
key from the ignition and lock all the doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded elec-
tronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE:
A key which has not been programmed is also considered an
invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock
cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is placed in the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has
been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to
any other vehicle.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is required for
authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys
may be performed at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks are
disabled. The system provides both audible and visible
signals. Every intrusion attempt causes six continuous alarm
cycles. Every alarm cycle lasts for 30 seconds. For 26 seconds,
the horn will sound, and the turn signal lights will flash. For
four seconds, it will pause. After a maximum of 10 alarm
cycles, only the turn signal lights will flash until the next
alarm activation.
To Arm The System
To arm the system, the Vehicle Security Alarm will set when
you use the key fob to lock the doors. If a door or the hood is
not properly shut, the alarm system will not be armed.
To Disarm The System
Use the key fob to unlock the door and disarm the system.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a
programmed Sentry Key is inserted into the ignition switch.
To exit the alarm mode, push the key fob unlock button, or
insert a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition switch.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of
turn lamps flashing. If the condition which initiated the
alarm is still present, the system will ignore that condition
and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm/disarm if you lock/
unlock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DOORS
Door Locks
Central Lock
The door locks can be locked or unlocked from inside the
vehicle by using the door handle.
• To lock the doors, push down on the door handle.
• To unlock the doors, pull up on the door handle.
Locking The Doors From The Outside
Follow the below methods to lock the vehicle from the
outside
Locking With A Key Fob
Key Fob
1 – Key Blade Release Button
2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button
3 – Lock Button
4 – Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal.
Horn activation settings after a Radio Frequency (RF) lock
command can be adjusted manually Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Locking With The Key Blade
Key Blade Released
Push the Key Blade Release Button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the doors exterior lock cylinder and
turn the key clockwise to lock the front door.
Unlock The Doors From The Outside
Follow the below methods to unlock the vehicle from the
outside:
Unlocking With A Key Fob For All Passenger Vans And
U.S. Cargo Vans — If Equipped
To unlock all the doors, push and release the unlock button
on the key fob. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowl-
edge the unlock signal. Push and release the Cargo unlock
button to unlock the rear cargo doors only.
Unlocking With A Key Fob For Canadian Cargo Vans — If
Equipped
Push and release the unlock button to unlock the front doors.
Push and release the Cargo unlock button to unlock the side
sliding doors and the rear cargo doors.
Unlocking With The Key Blade
Push the Key Blade Release Button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock all
doors.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The Vehicle
Pull up on the lock/unlock lever located on the drivers door
panel to the 1st detent to unlock all doors from inside the
vehicle.
Auto Unlock Doors
Auto Unlocking For All Passenger Vehicles and U.S. Cargo
Vehicles — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all doors when the driver door is
opened.
Auto Unlocking For Canadian Cargo Vehicles — If
Equipped
This feature unlocks all front doors when the driver door is
opened.
NOTE:
If the front passenger door, or the rear or side door is opened,
only the rear or side door is unlocked.
Sliding Side Door
On Cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted with a
spring-loaded latch that stops the door from opening any
further. To lock it, simply push the door as far as it will go; to
unlock it, pull forward firmly.
Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the Passenger
Vehicle and U.S. Cargo Vehicle — If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
all doors. Push and release the cargo unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the sliding side doors. To open one of the
sliding side doors, pull the handle out from the bottom, then
slide the door towards the rear of the vehicle until it locks
into place and cannot go any further. The turn signal lights
will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the Canadian
Cargo Vehicle — If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
the front two doors. Push and release the cargo unlock
button on the key fob once to unlock the passenger/cargo
area (side lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Unlocking With The Key Blade In Passenger Vehicle
Push the Key Blade Release Button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock all
doors.
Unlocking With The Key Blade In Cargo Vehicle
Push the Key Blade Release Button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the
front doors. Push the Key Blade Release Button to expose the
key blade, insert the key blade into the rear door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the
rear doors.
Closing/Locking With A Key Fob
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors, including the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors
and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash to acknowl-
edge the lock signal.
Horn activation settings after a Radio Frequency (RF) lock
command can be adjusted manually. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Locking With The Key Blade In Passenger Vehicle
Push the Key Blade Release button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key clockwise to lock all doors.
Locking With The Key Blade In Cargo Vehicle
Push the Key Blade Release button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key clockwise to lock the front doors.
Push the Key Blade Release button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the rear door exterior lock cylinder
and turn the key clockwise to lock the rear doors.
Closing And Locking From Outside
Grab the side door handle and push towards the front of the
vehicle. Once the side door is secured in the full closed posi-
tion, use one of the locking methods above to lock the sliding
side doors.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening And Closing From The Inside
Opening:
Pull the interior door handle switch to unlock the door, then
pull the handle and slide the door towards the rear of the
vehicle until it can go no further.
Closing:
Pull the interior door handle switch to release the door and
then push it towards the front of the vehicle.
Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device
The sliding side doors are provided with a device for locking
all the doors using an emergency lock in case of a power
fault.
The device can be engaged with the sliding side doors open
in one of the following position:
• Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device not engaged (doors
unlocked)
• KEL Device engaged (insert the ignition key blade into the
lock and rotate clockwise), doors locked
Key Emergency Lock Device
The device is released and the doors can be opened as
follows:
If the power is restored:
• By remote control.
• Opening a front door by inserting the key into the key
cylinder.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
If the power is not restored:
• Opening the driver side door by key blade and the other
doors (passenger's side and sliding side door) by pulling
the inner handle.
If the child lock was engaged and the previously described
locking procedure was carried out, operating the internal
handle will not open the door but will only realign the door
lock knob. To open the door, the outside handle must be
pulled. The door central locking/unlocking button is not
disabled by the engagement of the emergency lock.
Child Lock System
This system prevents the sliding side doors from being
opened from the inside.
The child locks can only be engaged/disengaged with the
sliding side door open:
Child Lock System
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key blade into the lock and
rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The device remains engaged even if the doors are unlocked
remotely. This system prevents the sliding side doors to be
opened from the inside.
NOTE:
For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll down
the window, and open the door using the outside door
handle.
Double Rear Swing Doors
The rear double swing doors are fitted through a fastening
system which stops them when they reach an opening angle
of approximately 90 degrees.
Rear Door Check Strap Location
To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees, push the
locking device (one on each side) and simultaneously open
the doors.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged
(locked).
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Using the key fob on the door, you can do the following:
• For Cargo versions with swing door/cargo doors:
centrally unlock the load compartment (sliding side doors
+ rear swing doors/tailgate), centrally lock all the doors.
• For versions with swing door: local unlocking/locking.
Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From The
Outside
To open the door, turn the key in the lock or push the cargo
unlock button on the key fob and then pull the exterior
handle to the left. To close the door, turn the key in the lock
or push the lock button on the key fob.
Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door From The
Inside
From inside the vehicle, use the interior door release mecha-
nism located on the left rear trim panel.
Opening The Second Swing Door
After having opened the first door, pull the handle located
on the door face toward the rear of the vehicle.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
The front driver and passenger seats can be adjusted forward
and rearward, and (if equipped), may be reclined and the
height and lumbar can be adjusted.
Seat Adjustments
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious injury
or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recliner Knob
4 — Lumbar Knob
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The height adjustment lever is located on the center outboard
side of the seat. Lift up or push down on the front lever to
adjust the front of the seat up or down.
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, rotate the knob rearward without
leaning back. To return the seatback to its normal upright
position, lean forward, rotate the knob forward until the
seatback is in the upright position.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of
lumbar support. The lumbar control knob is located on the
rear upper outboard side of the seatback. Rotate the control
forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the
seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seat-
backs. The controls for the front heated seats are located on
the lower outboard side of the seat.
Heated Seat Control Button
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. The LED on
the switch illuminates when the heated seat is on. Push the
switch a second time to shut the heating elements off.
NOTE:
• This feature is only available with the ignition key in MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two
to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insu-
lates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause serious burns due
to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat), and
lift it upward until the seatback releases.
Seatback Release Lever
2. Slowly fold down the seatback.
3. Pull forward on the lower release lever located on the
lower outboard side of seat and lift the seat for extended
cargo space.
Seat Release Lever
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Extended Cargo Space
4. Reverse order for original setting.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate
a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Front Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Front Head Restraint
Rear Adjustment
The center head restraint is adjustable and removable. To
raise the head restraint, push and hold the adjustment
button, located on the base of the head restraint and pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push and hold the adjustment button, and push downward
on the head restraint till the desired height is reached.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Center Head Restraint
Front Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then
push the release button and the adjustment button at the
base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To rein-
stall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Rear Removal
Outboard Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints can be removed by pushing the
release buttons, located at the base of the head restraint and
pull upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
Outboard Head Restraint Release Buttons
Center Head Restraint
To remove the head restraint, push the release button and
adjustment button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly and raise it as far as it can go. To reinstall the head-
rest, put the headrest posts into the holes while pushing the
release button and adjustment button. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or
downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is
located on the steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the control lever down-
ward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it
inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position,
pull the control lever up until fully engaged.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by
moving the small control under the mirror to the night posi-
tion (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be
adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the
day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If Equipped
From the inside of the vehicle, use the control lever to adjust
the mirror.
Manual Mirror Control Lever
Manual Folding Door Mirrors
The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to be folded
forward or rearward to help avoid damage.
Folding Mirrors
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a car
wash or a narrow location.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the mirror flag trim
above the driver’s door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn
the control knob toward the left or right mirror positions
indicated. Tilt the control knob in the direction you want the
mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror,
turn the control to the center (neutral) position to prevent
accidental mirror movements.
NOTE:
Operation of the power mirrors is only available with the
ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Driver Mirror Select Position
2 — Neutral Position
3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position
4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirror
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the head-
liner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be rotated
downward or up against the door glass. Your vehicle may be
equipped with courtesy mirror located on the passenger sun
visor.
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the head-
lights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam selection
and the passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the multifunction
lever to the headlight position. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light, clearance
lights and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, turn the end of the multifunction lever
back to the O (Off) position.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime Running
Lights (DRLs) will be deactivated.
To activate the DRLs, rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to the O (Off) position.
NOTE:
• The low beams and side/taillights will not be on with DRLs.
• In certain markets, the DRLs function may be optional and
can be programmed to be on or off through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
The DRLs will come on whenever the ignition is on, the
headlight switch is off, and the turn signal is off.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
High Beams
With the low beams activated, pull the multifunction lever
towards the steering wheel to turn on the high beams. A high
beam symbol will illuminate in the cluster to indicate the
high beams are on. Pull the multifunction lever a second time
to switch the headlights back to low beam.
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s ignition is turned off, both high and low beam
headlights will also turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on
until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
These lights can only be turned on with ignition key in the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position or removed, by moving the end
of the multifunction lever to O (Off) position and then to the
headlight position.
The warning light telltale in the instrument panel comes on.
The lights stay on until the next ignition cycle is performed.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for a preset period of time after the
engine is turned off.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/
LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel within two minutes. Each time the lever is
pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a
maximum of 210 seconds.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and
hold it for more than two seconds.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the climate controls.
Push the switch once to turn the fog lights on.
Push the switch a second time to turn the fog
lights off.
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s ignition is turned off, the fog lights will also
turn off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on
each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper oper-
ation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very
fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an
indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the
detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five times
then automatically turn off.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Interior Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the over-
head console. Each light is turned on by pushing the corre-
sponding switch.
Left Switch
• Push the left switch to the left to turn off the auto dome
lights. The dome lights will not automatically turn on
when a door is opened.
• Push the left switch to the right to turn on the dome lights.
Right Switch
• Push the right switch to the left to turn on the left map
light.
• Push the right switch to the right to turn on the right map
light.
Map/Dome Lights
1 — Auto/Off
2 — Dome
3 — Left Map
4 — Right Map
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Rear Lights
Cargo Vehicle
Cargo Vehicle Interior Lamp Locations
Lateral Roof Light
This is located on the right side of the load compartment.
Rear Roof Light
This is located on the rear panel of the load compartment.
In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically when you
open the sliding doors and the rear wing doors, and goes out
when you close them.
• Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the light off
when the doors are open.
• Push the right hand side of the lens to switch the light on
when the doors are open.
1 — Lateral Roof Light
2 — Rear Roof Light
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lateral Roof Light
Passenger Vehicle
The interior lamps are located in the center of the roof, above
the second row seating, and in the roof, in the center of the
rear load area.
Passenger Vehicle Interior Lamp Locations
1 — Off
2 — Auto
3 — On
1 — Rear Roof Light
2 — Second Row Seating Light
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Second Row Seating And Rear Roof Lights Operation
In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically when you
open the sliding doors and the rear wing doors, and goes out
when you close them.
• Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the light off
when the doors are open.
• Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch the light on
when the doors are open.
Interior Light
1 — Off
2 — Auto
3 — On
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped
The cargo compartment light comes on automatically when
the swing doors are opened and turns off when the doors are
closed.
Cargo Compartment Light
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right
side of the steering column.
NOTE:
The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the
ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Front Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
moved in several positions to access these modes.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Windshield Wiper Lever
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Low Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second
detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent. The wipers will operate at high speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent.
The wipers will operate at intermittent speed. When
the vehicle's speed increases, the time between the
wipes will decrease.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steering
wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate auto-
matically for three cycles after the lever is released.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers will
operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever
is released. When the lever is released, the wipers will return
to the off position and automatically shut off.
Rear Wiper Operation — If Equipped
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate the rear window wiper as follows:
• In intermittent mode when the front window wiper is not
operating
• In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front
window wiper) when the front window wiper is operating
• In continuous mode while vehicle is in REVERSE
With the windshield wipers on, and REVERSE gear engaged,
rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through
an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield
wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any
position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and
the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the off posi-
tion. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and
the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to
the wiper motor may occur.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
pushed for more than quarter of a second to activate the rear
window wiper as well. When the windshield wiper lever is
released, the wipers will return to normal operation.
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Control
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C
system is engaged. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control
selection.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
Rear Defrost Button — If Equipped
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the
knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures.
Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system
in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF
position.
Modes Control
Rotate this control to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted
to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes
to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Icon Description
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on at
least once a month for about 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer before the
Summer.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system.
When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu-
midified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets.
Icon Description
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level
or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix or
Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C
system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the
windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in
front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radi-
ator and through the condenser.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing oper-
ation.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if equipped) the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the
control button to blink and then turns off.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
is recommended. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Specifications” for proper coolant selection.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Specifications” for proper coolant selection. Use of the
air recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in mild,
rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on the inside
of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without Air Conditioning (A/C)
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the
heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window.
Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with
warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the wind-
shield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected
in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause odor, and if
they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush
and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air
filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to ,
on, and blower on high.
Roll down the windows for
a minute to flush out the hot
air. Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set the
mode control to the
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in position.
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control to
position and turn on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to the
position. If windshield
fogging starts to occur,
move the control to the
position.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
Power Window Switch Panel
The control on the left front door panel has up-down
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
front passenger door for passenger window control. If the
vehicle is equipped with rear power windows, a single
opening and closing switch on the rear passenger doors for
passenger window control is provided.
NOTE:
The key off power delay feature will allow the power
windows to operate for up to three minutes after the ignition
is turned off. This feature is canceled when either front door
is opened.
The window opening mechanism is fitted with sensors that
can detect the presence of an obstacle while the window is
closing. When this happens, the system activates and the
movement of the glass is immediately reversed.
If the presence of an object is detected and the system is acti-
vated, it may be necessary to perform the reset procedure by
fully opening the windows.
1 — Rear Window Control Buttons (If Equipped)
2 — Driver Passenger Window Control Buttons
3 — Rear Window Lock Button
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Auto-Down Feature
The window switches are equipped with an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch for half a second, release,
and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
auto-down operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly.
To open the window part way, lift the window switch to the
detent for less than half a second and release it to stop the
window.
NOTE:
The power window switches remain active for up to three
minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off.
Opening either of the vehicle’s front doors will cancel this
feature.
Auto-Up Feature
The window switches are equipped with an Auto-Up
feature. Lift the window switch to the detent for half a
second, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, pull up/push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the
detent for less than half a second and release it when you
want the window to stop.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Windows System Initialization
The power windows may be reset if any of the following
occurs:
• On the front doors:
• Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window is
moving
• 50 window movements without ever closing the
window
• On the rear doors (in addition to the condition for the front
doors):
• Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window is
moving
• The auto-reverse system is activated while the window
is moving and the door is opening
• 50 window movements without ever closing the
window
• One door opening movements with the window
moving, without ever closing the door
• Three door opening with the window in motion.
During these maneuvers, the upper stop position is
never reached
Proceed as follows for initialization:
1. Completely close the driver's door window, keeping the
operating button pushed for at least five seconds after the
(upper) end of travel position.
2. Proceed in the same way on the passenger's side door
button and on the buttons of rear doors.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped
This vehicle may be equipped with metal grates over the side
door windows. This feature is a part of the vehicle’s safety
system, and is designed to protect you and your passengers
in the event of an accident.
Window Bar Grates
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres-
sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your
vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down
in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
open the front windows together to minimize the buffeting.
WARNING!
The metal grates over the sliding door windows are
designed to protect you in the event of an accident.
Modification or removal of the grates could lead to
serious injury or death.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
Opening
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel
and in front of the driver's door.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into the opening
beneath the center of the hood and push up the safety
latch lever to release it, before raising the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in hood slot
to secure the hood in the open position.
Hood Prop Rod
Closing
CAUTION!
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in close
position before closing the hood. Damage may occur.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood
is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
To make it easier to secure your load, there are hooks fixed
to the floor (if equipped).
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Cargo Version)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version)
NOTE:
Power washing is not allowed inside the cargo area.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
(Continued)
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat
belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose.
A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors
provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle.
Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or
behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to
sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
NOTE:
The glove compartment handle is equipped with a lock. To
lock the glove compartment, insert the ignition key blade
into the glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn
the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the
reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the instru-
ment panel above the glove compartment.
Dash Storage
Overhead Console Storage
There is additional shelf storage above the front sun visors.
Overhead Console Storage Location
Cupholders
A cupholder is located in the front and rear of the center
console.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small elec-
tronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The
power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
labeled with a “key” are powered when the ignition is in the
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, while the outlets labeled
with a “battery” are connected directly to the battery and
powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets
The power outlets are located in between the driver and
front passenger seats.
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Load Compartment Power Outlet
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on the left
side of the rear cargo compartment. Depending on trim
levels, the Power Outlet location may vary.
Load Compartment Power Outlet
Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts to the outlet. Using unsuitable adapters may
damage the outlet.
1 — #86 Fuse 15A Blue IP Power Outlet 12V (Key)
2 — #85 Fuse 15A Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V (Key)
3 — #30 Fuse 15A Blue 2nd IP Power Outlet 12V (Battery)
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not
exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed
over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized dealer can
order and install Mopar crossbars built specifically for this
roof rack system.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accesso-
ries still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a suffi-
cient length of time to allow the generator to recharge
the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
(Continued)
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the
maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at the
upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns
using the anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar cross-
bars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in the desired position, re-tighten the with the
wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in
use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately
24 inches (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction can then
be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft
using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm).
• If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of
satellite radio reception. For improved satellite radio
reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite
radio antenna.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO NOT
carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars
deployed. The load should be secured and placed on
top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket
or other protective layer between the load and the roof
surface.
2
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first, with
tie down loops used as additional securing points if
needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie
down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms
with the tie loops. Check the straps and thumb wheels
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal
area should be secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 74
75
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
• The fuel pump arrow symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
• The pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, refer to “Cooling System Pressure Cap” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” and follow the warnings
under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn
the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
4. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
5. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in this chapter for
further information.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interac-
tive display located on the instrument panel, your instru-
ment cluster display can show you how systems are working
and give you warnings when they are not. The instrument
cluster display controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the specific informa-
tion you want and make selections and adjustments.
Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The menu items described below are an example of what can
be found in the vehicle's menu:
• Dimmer
• Speed Beep
• Trip A / B (options are selectable through the steering
wheel stalk)
• Buzzer Volume
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the instrument
panel to the right of the steering column:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
• MENU Button
Push and release the MENU button for a time longer than
one second to access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the
MENU button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the main menu and submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the main menu and submenus.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Uconnect system, some of the menu items
will be present in the radio head unit. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Dimmer:
With headlights on and without entering in the menu, push
the up or down arrow button to increase or decrease the
brightness of the instrument panel, graphics and command
buttons.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the
first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by single
pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant setup
menu.
4. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by single
pushes) to select the new setting for this submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main
menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
display in the instrument cluster display. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means
the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time
you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times,
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
Speed Beep
This function is used to set a speed limit (MPH or km/h); the
driver is alerted when this limit is exceeded.
To set the desired speed limit:
1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will show the
wording (SPEED BEEP) and the unit (MPH) or (km/h)
previously set.
2. If the function is on, push and release the up or down
arrow button to select the required speed limit and then
push MENU to confirm.
NOTE:
The speed may be set in the range from 20 to 125 MPH (30 to
200 km/h) according to the previously chosen unit.
The setting will increase/decrease by five units each time the
up or down arrow button is pushed. Hold down the up or
down arrow button to automatically increase/decrease the
setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment when you
approach the desired value.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu screen
or hold the MENU button down to return to the standard
screen without storing.
To cancel the setting:
1. Briefly push the MENU button, “ON” will flash in the
display.
2. Push the down arrow button, “OFF” will flash in the
display.
3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
Trip B Data
This function can be used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off)
the Trip B display (Partial Trip).
Refer to “Trip Computer” in this section for further informa-
tion.
To switch the function On/Off:
1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will flash On
or Off according to the previous setting.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to select.
Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu screen
or hold the MENU button down to return to the standard
screen without storing.
Buzzer Volume
With this function, the volume of the acoustic signal which
accompanies the display of failure/warning can be adjusted
according to seven levels.
To set the desired volume:
1. Push the MENU button, the previously set volume level
will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu screen or
hold the MENU button down to return to the standard
screen without storing.
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seat Belt Buzzer
Only shows in the instrument cluster display if the seat belt
reminder was previously deactivated by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
This is a one-time occurrence to enable the acoustic signal.
Exit Menu
This is the last function that closes the cycle of settings listed
in the menu screen.
1. Pushing the MENU button briefly will return the display
to the standard screen without storing.
2. Push the down arrow button to return to the first menu
item on the display.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays information
such as trip information, range, fuel consumption, average
speed, and travel time).
NOTE:
The Uconnect System also has a Trip Computer display and
menus to customize the information displayed in the cluster.
For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column stalk,
can be used to display and to reset the previously described
values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a new
trip.
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system manually.
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or kilome-
ters or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours
and 59 minutes), the system is reset automatically.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the system.
NOTE:
If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens
concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the information associated
with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for over
two seconds to reset trip information.
Exit Trip
1. To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than
one second.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing settings.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Range
• Trip distance A
• Average Economy A
• Instantaneous Economy
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time)
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Average Economy B
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time)
NOTE:
“Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B Data”).
“Range” and “Instantaneous Economy” cannot be reset.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving conditions
will not change. The message “----” will appear on the
display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
The range depends on several factors: driving style, type of
route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, etc.), conditions
of use of the vehicle (load, tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning
must take into account the above notes.
Travel Distance
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Fuel Consumption
This value shows the approximate average consumption
since the last reset.
Current Fuel Consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is constantly
updated. The message “----” will appear on the display if the
vehicle is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle's average speed as a function of
the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal
when applicable. These indications are indicative and precau-
tionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/
or alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display first if appli-
cable. The system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake func-
tions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indi-
cate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid
level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In
this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the
ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in
the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A
leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake
fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a spec-
ified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle
should have service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning
the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN posi-
tion. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds.
The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied
or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied
with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery
is not charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more
door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will also
be a single chime.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to inform of a
problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is
running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmis-
sion is placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn
off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit,
a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the
engine is able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon
as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will
sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light
turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light turns
off, you may continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in
the instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indi-
cate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized
dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine.
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
This warning light appears on the panel when the
engine oil level falls below the minimum recom-
mended value. Restore the correct engine oil level or
contact your authorized dealer for service.
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning
and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake
warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as
soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2–3 gal
(9–11 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of
the following conditions occur: Engine Oil Pressure
Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Parking
Sensor Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Fail/Intervention, Generic
Failure on Trailer, or Air Bag telltale recovery.
The telltale will blink in case of an Air Bag Warning Light
Failure. Contact an authorized dealer immediately for
service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower
than the recommended value and/or that slow pres-
sure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration
and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check
the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the vehicle
security alarm system has detected an attempt to
break into the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size equipped
on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light will illu-
minate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before
engine start. After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN
position, if there is a problem with the Sentry Key System,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on. This condition will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the
bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch
from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
NOTE:
This warning light will illuminate when the vehicle security
alarm system has detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle
will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light — If
Equipped
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or MAR/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when
ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN,
the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
Green Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the
turn signal indicator will flash independently and
the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will
flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction
lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
For further information, refer to “Exterior Lights” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle”.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
For further information, refer to “Exterior Lights” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle”.
Cruise Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise
control is activated.
NOTE:
There will be no change in the indicator light when the
desired speed is set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that
the high beam headlights are on. With the low
beams activated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the
rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high
beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating properly,
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel
economy, as well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will
soon occur. Immediate service is required.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in
“Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure
to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect
equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to
read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information stored
in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
3
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test
over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illumi-
nated until you place the ignition in the off position or
start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an autho-
rized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system to update.
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that
the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 96
97
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed
to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under
adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a
separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to
prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on
slippery surfaces.
The system's pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the
light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system
reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the igni-
tion OFF and ON again may reset the ABS if the fault
detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment
that may be susceptible to interference caused by
improperly installed or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equip-
ment should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking
or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 97
98 SAFETY
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the
vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system
reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing
sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occur-
rences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning
properly.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake
Control (EBC) system that includes the Brake Assist System
(BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions and are commonly
referred to as ESC.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the
vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situa-
tion by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the
brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking
is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the
BAS is deactivated.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 98
SAFETY 99
(Continued)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional
control and stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle main-
tain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path
intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of
the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appro-
priate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appro-
priate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the condi-
tions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 99
100 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the MAR (ON/RUN) posi-
tion for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (km) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in
the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activa-
tion/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is partially off.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the perfor-
mance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance.
Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effective-
ness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 100
SAFETY 101
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input
and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Hill Start Assist (HSA) is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the
level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period
of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal.
If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short
period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake
pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as
the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing
uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the
activation criteria have been met. The system will not activate if
the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P).
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 101
102 SAFETY
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of
wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s)
and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced accelera-
tion and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differ-
ential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and
ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the vehicle to
recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system
may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will
become active automatically once an excessively swaying
trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will
not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always
remember the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 102
SAFETY 103
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pres-
sure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until
the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold
placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS
Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pres-
sure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will auto-
matically update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this infor-
mation.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS
Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approx-
imately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 103
104 SAFETY
27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on.
In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the TPMS Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and
the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
market wheels can cause sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 104
SAFETY 105
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure
in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the “Check tire pressure” text message will
display when one or more of the four active road tire pres-
sures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your
vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically
update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin-
guish once the updated tire pressures have been received.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and a
proper text message will be displayed. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault
still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facil-
ities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 105
106 SAFETY
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
Your vehicle can be equipped with either Tire Service Kit,
compact spare tire or regular size spare tire (with or without
original TPMS sensor).
1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if equipped): After
fixing the punctured tire with original tire sealant, the
original situation will be restored, so system will turn off
the telltale during the normal drive.
2. Compact Spare Tire – (if equipped): The compact spare
wheel is not equipped with TPMS sensor. So when
mounted, during the normal drive the system will turn
on the telltale (flashing for approximately 75 seconds then
remains solid). This condition persists until a wheel
equipped with original TPMS sensor has been mounted
on the vehicle.
3. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with TPMS sensor):
When mounted, during the normal drive the system will
turn on the telltale (flashing for approximately 75 seconds
then remains solid). This condition persists until a wheel
equipped with original TPMS sensor has been mounted
on the vehicle. Then the system will be restored and the
telltale will turn off during the normal drive.
4. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS sensor):
When mounted, the telltale will turn off during the
normal drive.
5. In all the above cases please check the replacement tire
inflation pressure before driving your vehicle.
6. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is driven for
short periods of time, then the system can take a while to
be restored.
NOTE:
For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior, please wait
for about 20 minutes in key-off during each tire substitution.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 106
SAFETY 107
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 107
108 SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk
of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt
properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information) must be secured in the appropriate
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to
inflate.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 108
SAFETY 109
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the
“Customer Assistance” section for customer service
contact information.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far
away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 109
110 SAFETY
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few
seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when
the ignition switch is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN posi-
tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is
moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has
completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the
seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled
again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat
is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is prop-
erly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 110
SAFETY 111
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being
thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe
injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat
belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much
greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You
can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passen-
gers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver,
should always wear their seat belts whether or not an
air bag is also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another
in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person,
no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 111
112 SAFETY
(Continued)
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong
hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt
is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an autho-
rized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt
snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the
seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat
belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 112
SAFETY 113
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat,
and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your
lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 113
114 SAFETY
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 114
SAFETY 115
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it
up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 115
116 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant
women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is
reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effec-
tiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the
vehicle is stationary.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 116
SAFETY 117
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with preten-
sioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the
seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for
all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt place-
ment by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly
and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 117
118 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
Vehicle Without Rear Seat
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is equipped
with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which
is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional
information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Location — Vehicle
Without Rear Seat
Vehicle With Rear Seat
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations — Vehicle
With Rear Seat
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 118
SAFETY 119
(Continued)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this
case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any
slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that
has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and
under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the
entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 119
120 SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to
retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking
mode.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a colli-
sion. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with
the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System Compo-
nents:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any
other seat belt function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase
the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 120
SAFETY 121
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when
the ignition switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After
the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single
chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag
system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges
are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 121
122 SAFETY
(Continued)
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as
a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 122
SAFETY 123
Driver and Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on
the instrument panel or steering wheel because any
such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or
attempt to open them manually. You may damage the
air bags and you could be injured because the air bags
may no longer be functional. The protective covers for
the air bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe
injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat
belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 123
124 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection
by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good
indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from
an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags,
it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas
is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way
as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front
air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver
and front passenger, and position the front occupants for
improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 124
SAFETY 125
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering
column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduc-
tion potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with
such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 125
126 SAFETY
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where
the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are
located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between
you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into
you, causing serious injury.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 126
SAFETY 127
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which could
alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle
for any reason.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air
Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children
must be properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against
the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
Bags.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy
in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system deter-
mines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether
deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experi-
ences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy the side
air bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with
electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/
or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy
and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns
or those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse
the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move
to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If
you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be
in place to protect you.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also,
have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on
the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention
of the Enhanced Accident Response System
• Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric Power Steering
• Brake booster
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition
switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed
from ignition AVV/START or MAR/RUN to ignition
STOP/OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instru-
ment panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including
removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If
it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times,
including babies and children. Every state in the United
States, and every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child.
Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings
in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels
attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards.
You should also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-child-
safety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in a
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old
or who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in a
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of
the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have outgrown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of
the vehicle
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is
recommended for children from birth until they reach the
weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child
seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so
they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in
the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who are over two years old or who have outgrown the
rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-posi-
tioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly.
If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt
alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between
the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not
move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it
can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the
child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat posi-
tion. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall
the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit peri-
odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of posi-
tion. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat
to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight
of the Child +
Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor-
ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see
the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle — Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations —
Vehicle With Rear Seat
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use
the seat belt and tether anchor instead
of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner LATCH
lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If the
center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center
position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes
The 2nd row head restraints can be
removed in every seating position if
they interfere with the installation of the
child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting
To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages — Vehicles Equipped
With Rear Seating
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found
at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat-
back, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run
your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages — Vehicles
Equipped With Rear Seating
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that
seating position. For some second row seats, you may
need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint
to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not approved
for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments.
You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical instal-
lation instructions.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top
tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and acci-
dentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installa-
tion, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should
not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt In
Vehicles With Rear Seating
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into
a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the
retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to
the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in “Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant
Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations — Vehicle
With Rear Seating
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward
facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed,
if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes
The 2nd row head restraints can be
removed in every seating position if
they interfere with the installation of
the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt path
of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR
retractor.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to
pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not
twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against
the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back
into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked,
you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the
retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating
position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether
strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You
may need to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is avail-
able.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
the tether strap around the outboard side of the head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap
of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is
approved for that seating position, located behind the
top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System”
for the location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
Tether Strap Mounting
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Vehicles —
Vehicles Not Equipped With Rear Seating
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a family
vehicle and is not intended for carrying children in the front
passenger seat(s). Never install rear-facing child restraints in
this vehicle. If you must carry a child in a forward-facing
child restraint, the passenger seat should be moved to the
full rearward position and the child must be in a proper
restraint system based on its age, size and weight. Follow the
instructions below to secure the child restraint using the seat
belt and tether anchorage.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make
sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening
between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be secured in
the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger air bag.
In a collision, a passenger air bag may deploy causing
severe injury or death to infants riding in rear-facing
infant restraints.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt In
Vehicles Without Rear Seating
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is equipped
with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR). This
seat belt is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into
a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the
retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For addi-
tional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraint Systems”.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints (Commercial Vehicle)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations For Front
Bucket Seats
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to
pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not
twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against
the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back
into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked,
you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the
retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating
position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether
strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage (Commercial Vehicle)
This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap anchorage
located behind the front passenger seatback, near the floor.
When installing a forward-facing child restraint, always
secure the top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether anchorage.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable head restraints, raise
the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the two posts.
If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the
tether strap around the outboard side of the head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Installation
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles
in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear
doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls
to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at
high speed.
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if
they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor
condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After
the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an autho-
rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the
blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the
air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer
for service if your defroster is inoperable.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
(Continued)
(Continued)
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake
or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on
a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat
interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the
vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the
driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and
cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check
the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including
spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal
and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes
are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the posi-
tion of the floor mat and may cause interference with
the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed,
always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the
floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with
the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install
the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to
clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by
lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 156
157
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained
without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position and
release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a
location accessible to children). A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cold Weather Operation
To ensure reliable starting at low temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when
the ambient temperature is less than -31°F (-35° C) and the oil
temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater
has not been used. The message “plug in engine heater” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient
temperature is below -25°F (-32° C) at the time the engine is
shut off as a reminder.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to
ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition to the AVV/”START” position and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal
Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedure, and has not
experienced an extended park condition as identified in
"Extended Park Starting" procedure it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there.
Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This should
clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the
ignition key in the MAR position, release the accelerator pedal
and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps below
to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s
side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the heater
cord in place.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the converter and
vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait
60 seconds before trying again.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
hook-and-loop strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option.
If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available
from your authorized Mopar dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps
to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or
90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted
as a problem. Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break in period. Add oil as
required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake
is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or
first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To
apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light”
will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury.
Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in
PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first
gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle always come to a complete stop, then
apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition
key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition
key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the full STOP (OFF/LOCK) (key
removal) position. The key can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) posi-
tion, and once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the MAR/
RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal
must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector
and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK
(or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position
and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects
REVERSE while driving forward), the position indicator will
blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
or kilometers.
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet the
needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software
and calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s driving
experience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and
driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very specific
driving situations and conditions.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control. Moving the gear selector into the ERS (-/+)
position (beside the DRIVE position) activates ERS mode,
displays the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
prevents automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode,
toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) will
change the highest available gear. Refer to "Electronic Range
Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further informa-
tion.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE,
or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably
in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In ERS
mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in
the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially
important when the engine is cold.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmis-
sion into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution,
turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake,
• Shift the transmission into PARK,
• Turn the engine OFF, and
• Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it
is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the gear
selector and firmly move the selector all the way forward
until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify
that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will
not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle always come to a complete stop, then
apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition
key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the ignition
key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
the drivetrain.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Opera-
tion” in this section for further information to select a lower
gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
will improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmis-
sion shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the
range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up
time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch, and
shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission
fluid is warm refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some acceler-
ations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the trans-
mission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km)
of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. The torque converter clutch will function normally
once the transmission is sufficiently warm.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if you
set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the transmis-
sion will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift through the
lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE posi-
tion, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting
between all available gears.
Moving the gear selector to the ERS position (beside DRIVE)
will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear.
Once in ERS mode, moving the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) will change the top available gear, which will
be displayed in the instrument cluster.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position.
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration
(engine braking), move the gear selector into the ERS posi-
tion, then simply press and hold it forward (-). The transmis-
sion will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be
possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will
observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at
very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there
is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if
a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or
the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate
inspection efforts through your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of
the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid
temperature and it should be avoided when possible.
Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with
the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and
to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill.
Use only manufacturer's recommended power steering
fluid.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steering
components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1 — On/Off
2 — RES (+)/Resume/Accel
3 — SET (–)/Set Speed/Decel
4 — CAN/Cancel
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the
desired speed greater than 25 mph (40 km/h), push the SET
(-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on
level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The speed increment is dependent on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement is dependent on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal
is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go
too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CAN button, or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deacti-
vate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch off
erases the set speed from memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense system provides an audible indication of the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a detected
obstacle when backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage Precau-
tions” in this section for limitations of this system and recom-
mendations.
The ParkSense system is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance from
an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert
becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The ParkSense system is automatically deactivated when a
trailer equipped by Mopar is hitched to the vehicle. The
system will be automatically activated as soon as the trailer
is removed. If it does not happen, turning the key ignition
switch to OFF and then to ON again would be needed. If a
non-Mopar trailer hitch is mounted, the sensor deactivation
cannot be guaranteed.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper,
monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal
direction, from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches
(140 cm) from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to
24 inches (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper,
depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors Locations
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense system indi-
cates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to
the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the
underside of the vehicle during the parking maneuver.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is
engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that
the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between
the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the
obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the
presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates
that the obstacle is less than 12 inches (30 cm) away.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance
increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance
measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition occurs
for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after three seconds
(stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls).
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications
A malfunction of the ParkSense sensors or system is indi-
cated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the instrument
panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message is
displayed on the instrument cluster display (if
equipped). Refer to “Warning Lights And
Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. Failures are
indicated immediately if they occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is
in failure condition, the instrument cluster display shall
indicate that the ParkSense system is unavailable, without
reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single
sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system
is turned off automatically.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Park
Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle
Distance
An obstacle
is present
within the
sensors'
field of
view
Audible signal (dashboard
loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate
that increases as the distance
decreases
• Emits continuous tone at
12 inches (30 cm)
• Adjustable volume level
programmable through personal
settings in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Failure
Sensor or
system
failures
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display
• Message is displayed on
instrument cluster display (if
equipped)
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing
stations, clean sensors quickly while keeping the vapor jet/
high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from
the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise,
you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction to keep the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the ParkSense system.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter out
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in sensor
field of view. The filtering operation must be performed only
by an authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is
put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
The Rear Back Up Camera can also be activated when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE through the Uconnect System. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
If one of the rear cargo doors is not completely closed, the
Back Up Camera cannot provide an accurate image of the
area behind the vehicle. A dedicated message will appear on
the Uconnect display indicating the camera is not in the
correct position.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is discon-
nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Camera Delay setting can be set to on/off in the rear
camera settings menu. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE and the Camera Delay is turned off, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears on display again.
When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE, and
Camera Delay is activated in the menu screen, the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds,
unless the speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph (13 km/
h), the transmission is in PARK, or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of
the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following
table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the
camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a
soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
(Continued)
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
The driver's side sliding door cannot be opened while the
fuel door is open. This feature operates only when the sliding
door is in a closed position prior to opening the fuel door.
3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
full.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close fuel
filler door.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations and
may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”to
turn on.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is prop-
erly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come
on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle
is refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed
to the driver's side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of vehicle
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place gas containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system
could result from using an improper fuel tank filler
tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into
the fuel system and may cause the “Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)” to turn on, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must
be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.
Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the
actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be
equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all
loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of
the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long
as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear
GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is
to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation.
Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over
the GVWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important
that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly
over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten
useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components
do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly
as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If
weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded
either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified
GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
B-Pillar or the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's
GVWR and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this infor-
mation to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The
total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in this chapter for further information.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.
Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
this chapter for further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the
load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction asso-
ciated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result
if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) recog-
nizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other
connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the
most popular on the market today and they are commonly
used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition
of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively
to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/
loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking perfor-
mance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and
should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight
ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your
bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Consider the following items when computing the weight on
the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in
or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to
the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed
options or dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And
Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in “Scheduled Servicing”.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When towing a
trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle
and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
cause of many trailer collisions.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not
make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
WARNING!
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that
is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that
may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload
your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of
control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis
structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case
is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the
trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
• GVWR
• GTW
• GAWR
• Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare
tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire inflation
procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum
system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could
cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake
controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but
you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the
following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into
vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded,
it should have its own brakes and they should be of
adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort,
and longer stopping distances.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The trans-
mission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent
shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does
occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control to select a lower gear range.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and
heat build up. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
• When using the ERS shift control, select the highest gear
that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent
downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired speed
can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to main-
tain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to
avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher
gear range or vehicle speed when grade and road condi-
tions allow.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the Speed Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you
can get back to cruising speed.
• Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state
and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway
Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this proce-
dure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure
the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow,
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent
damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warn-
ings before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause
your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,
flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away
swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
5
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing water
that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted
on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that is
under water and if there are any obstacles in the way
before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to
your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect
your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle,
etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing
water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any
fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in
further damage. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it
to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 198
199
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instru-
ment panel below the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle
is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers may wear
down your battery.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 199
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Lamps C10W
Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W
Luggage Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Low Beam Headlamp H11
Front High Beam Headlamps HB3
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See an authorized dealer)
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer upper head-
lamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
Rear Stop Lamp P21W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See an authorized dealer)
Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W
Reverse Light W16W
Front Fog Lamps H11
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced
visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 201
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Install the bulb into socket.
4. Rotate the bulb/socket clockwise into the lamp locking it
in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Parking And Daytime Running Lights
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer lower head-
lamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket clock-
wise into lamp locking it in place.
4. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not serviced
separately. See an authorized dealer for replacement of these
lights.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
The rear light clusters contain taillight, brake light, direction
indicator and reverse/rear fog light bulbs. To access the light
clusters, proceed as follows:
1. Open the rear doors.
2. Remove the screws and remove the tail lamp assembly.
3. Remove the screws and separate the backplate from the
lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counterclockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows:
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
Third Brake Light (Center Mount)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two fastening
screws and extract the cluster.
2. For versions with swing doors, remove rubber plugs,
remove retaining tabs and extract the cluster.
3. For versions with high roof and swing doors, remove the
pressure-fit plastic guard and rubber cap using a screw-
driver, release the retaining tags as shown in the figure
and remove the unit.
4. Remove the appropriate tabs and remove the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
License Plate Lights
Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:
1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove the lens by lifting
to the left.
2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from the side
contacts; insert the new bulbs and make sure they are
correctly clamped between these contacts.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Dome Lamp With Spot Lights
To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:
1. Remove dome lamp by depressing the tabs, using a suit-
able tool.
Dome Lamp Assembly
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Open protective cover.
Dome Lamp
3. Replace the bulbs releasing them from the side contacts
making sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured
between the contacts.
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it back into its
housing, making sure that it locks into place.
Rear Roof Lamp
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove roof lamp by depressing the tabs, using a suit-
able tool.
Roof Lamp
1 — Protective Cover
2 — Bulbs
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
2. Open the cover.
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
3. Replace the bulb releasing them from the side contacts
making sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured
between the contacts.
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it back into its
housing, making sure that it locks into place.
1 — Cover
1 — Bulb
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FUSES Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the
engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses,
remove fasteners and remove the cover.
Front Distribution Unit
The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to
each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the
original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse
inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury,
fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off and/
or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized
dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag
system, braking system), power unit systems (engine
system, transmission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 40 Amp Orange –
Rear Power Windows, Fog Lamps, Front Heated Seats
(If Equipped)
F02 30 Amp Green – Rear Power Windows, Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)
F02 30 Amp Green – Fog Lamps, Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)
F02
20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – BSM System Module
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Secondary Loads ECM
F14 – 15 Amp Blue High Beam
F15 – 15 Amp Blue IP Power Outlet 12 Volt
F16 – 5 Amp Tan ECM and Transmission Shifter
F17 – 25 Amp Clear ECM Power Loads
F18 – 5 Amp Tan ECM Load, Main Relay
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster (If Equipped)
F21 – 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock
F22 – 10 Amp Red
Primary ECM Loads
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow BSM System
F24 – 5 Amp Tan BSM System, Positive Key and Steering Angle Sensor
F30 – 15 Amp Blue 2nd Instrument Panel Power Outlet
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump
F84 – 15 Amp Blue AT Module
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet 12 Volts
F86 – 15 Amp Blue IP Power Outlet 12 Volts
F87 – 5 Amp Tan IBS
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown External Mirror Defrost (If Equipped)
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module
(BCM) and is located on the driver's side under the instru-
ment panel.
Fuse Panel Cover
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F53 5 Amp Beige KL 30 (+30) - IPC, FTM
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Doors Locking
F36 15 Amp Blue
KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC,
Radio, SGW
F43 15 Amp Blue Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Windows
F50 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror
Adjustment Command, HVAC, RVC,
HWB Coils
F37 5 Amp Beige
KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch (N.O.),
IPC, Brake Pedal Switch (N.C.)
F49 5 Amp Beige
KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, TTM,
SGW, and Heaters Light
F31 5 Amp Beige KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Windows
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
Central Unit Fuse Panel
The central power fuse panel is located on the driver’s side
under the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel Cover
Fuse Panel
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Passenger (If Equipped)
F2 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Driver (If Equipped)
F3 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Driver side (If Equipped)
F4 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Passenger side (If Equipped)
F5 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location — If Equipped
The jack and tools are stowed under the rear drivers front
seat or in the rear cargo area. It depends on the trim level.
Jack/Tools Location
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a
jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
Removing The Spare Tire — If Equipped
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. Attach the wrench handle to the winch extension.
Jack Tools
2. To access the winch mechanism open the rear doors of the
vehicle to expose the winch mechanism access cover.
Remove the access cover and install the winch extension
into the winch mechanism.
Winch Location
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
3 — Emergency Screwdriver
4 — Bolt Install Wrench
5 — Wheel Chock
6 — Jack
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Tools
Winch Location
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
3. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to
allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Lowering The Spare Tire
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch
extension only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is
not recommended and can damage the winch.
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
Spare Tire
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Remove the retainer nut prior to removing the retainer
from the wheel.
Retainer Nut
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable.
Lifting Spare Tire
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Retainer
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
Jack Warning Label
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
• The stowed spare tire should always be checked for
security by pushing on it with your hand, at the loca-
tion under the rear bumper, behind the vehicle. The
spare tire should not move when fully secured by the
winch under the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Locations
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug bolts with the
wrench handle by turning them to the left one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of
the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Place the jack underneath the jack engagement location that
is closest to the flat tire.
Front Lifting Point
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
3. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged in the described location.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right
until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel lug bolts
using the bolt install wrench.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle
could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be
crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle
that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 222
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
Mounting Spare Tire
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for proper wheel lug bolt torque.
8. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
9. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Refer to “Vehicles With Alloy Wheels” in this
section for instructions on stowing alloy wheels.
10. Stow the jack and tools under the driver’s seat.
11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
the tire pressure, as required.
12. When you place the spare tire back on the winch or if you
carry the tire in need of repair on the winch, always check
that the tire is properly secured under the vehicle by pushing
on the stowed tire under the rear bumper at the back of the
vehicle. If the tire has motion when pushed, use the tools to
re-tighten the winch until a loud click is heard.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing
outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire
is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 223
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Vehicles With Alloy Wheels
For stowing a damaged tire on vehicles with alloy wheels,
remove the adapter bracket and bolts from the storage bag in
the glove compartment and follow the steps below:
1. Take the adapter and fit the plastic spacer between the
spring and the flange of the bracket (The adapter bracket
is sold separately through the dealer).
Adapter/Spacer
2. The plastic fin must be directed downwards and perfectly
coincide with the flange cut part; fit the bracket in the
adapter, fold the bracket up and secure it to the adapter
with the fastening knob.
Adapter/Bracket
1 — Adapter
2 — Plastic Spacer
1 — Adapter
2 — Fastening Knob
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
3. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted adapter
on the inner part of the rim, using the supplied bolts
fasten the wheel to the adapter using the bolt install
wrench.
Alloy Wheel Mounting
4. Tighten the bolts with the wrench handle.
5. Rotate the winch mechanism clockwise until the wheel is
properly stowed under the vehicle and until the wench
makes three audible noises.
6. Reach underneath and shake tire by hand to confirm that
it is secure. The tire should not move. If the tire is still
loose and/or three audible noises are not heard, place
and secure damaged wheel into the vehicle and seek
dealer assistance for the winch mechanism.
This is for temporary use only.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 225
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel. Install
the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the
cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end of
the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Bolt
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Road Wheel
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 226
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while holding at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star
pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice.
Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for correct wheel bolt torque.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly
seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit
can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger seat.
Tire Service Kit Storage
Tire Service Kit Usage
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair
using the Tire Service Kit located under the passenger seat.
Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can be repaired; the
kit can be used in all weather conditions. Do not remove the
foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 227
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out from
the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw the clear
flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Button
2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Sealant Bottle
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch
(6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 228
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet socket.
Start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position.
The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air
will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached, turn
off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet
(10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the sealant
inside the tire.
Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving the
vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the tire.
After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If the
pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle, as
the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest authorized
dealer.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or
absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case
of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of chil-
dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 229
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the infla-
tion process to reach the correct tire pressure and continue
driving.
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on the
dashboard as a reminder to the driver that a tire has been
treated with Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration date at an
authorized dealer.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Canister
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the
tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot after
use, so it should be handled carefully.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,
away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this
WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and
serious injury or death.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 230
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Starting
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap.
Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post.
Positive Battery Post Location
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or
damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical
system may occur.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 231
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK (P) and turn the ignition to STOP.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the
vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the parking
brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands
and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin
or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from
the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury could
result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or
the discharged vehicle.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 232
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable
to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery,
let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 233
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you
should have the battery and charging system inspected at an
authorized dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending
overheat condition:
• If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine
cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant
(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or
hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 234
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 235
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P) before the
ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key
removal) position. To remove the key manually, proceed as
follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in
the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the cargo
box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping
control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of the
travel position, then lock the steering column in position,
push the control handle up until fully engaged.
5. Using the Allen Key, undo the lower steering column
cover screws, and remove the lower cover.
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and with
the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 235
236 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Release Tab Location
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column
cover.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK (P) position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate the
gear selector boot from the center console.
Gear Selector Boot Location
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact an authorized dealer to have the
reinstall procedure carried out. If you would like to
proceed in performing the reinstall procedure special
attention must be paid to the correct coupling of the
clips. Otherwise damage to the cover or noise might be
heard due to incorrect fastening of the lower cover.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 237
5. Insert a small screwdriver or a similar tool into the gear
selector override access hole (at the right front corner of
the gear selector assembly), then push and hold the over-
ride release lever down. While holding the override
release lever down, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL (N).
7. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.
Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R), while
gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accel-
erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. When-
ever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine
to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This
will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 237
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Push the “ESC OFF” switch, to place the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the “ESC OFF” switch again to restore “ESC On”
mode.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are stuck and
do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what
the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage
the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equip-
ment designed for this purpose, following equipment manu-
facturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural
members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK (P)
for towing.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a towing
dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle
damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage
to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 239
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information on the Enhanced Accident Response
System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 240
241
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator
system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi-
cator message will illuminate. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extended engine idle time,
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since
last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message
after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Oil
Change Reset” in “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed
10,000 miles (16,000 km), 350 hours of engine run time or
12 months, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run
or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine
run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environ-
ment or is operated predominantly at idle, or only very low engine
RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedule for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires
• Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
• Inspect the CV joints
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses, lines and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
1
X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Change brake fluid every two years.
2
X X X X X X X
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Replace spark plugs.
3
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) if operated in dusty and off road environment.
2. The brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
3. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5
6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the
knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an
accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Engine Compartment — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up
engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range.
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and
the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch mark-
ings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers share the same fluid
reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a
few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer
fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the
wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
(Continued)
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact
your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery
when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on
skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or
sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that
the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery
posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are
identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be
tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any proce-
dure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter for further infor-
mation.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed
10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine
run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run
or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended. Precautions have been
taken to safeguard all parts and connections however,
the pressures generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress cannot be
guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom-
mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
chapter.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil
filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi-
nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment.
Contact an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil
filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters
should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine
oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” maintenance
interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters
are a high quality filter and are recommended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the
air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start
of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a
low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system
to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Infor-
mation Book, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat
tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate,
decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar
Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any
lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease
should be removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year,
preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a
high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri-
cant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the wind-
shield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild
nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt
or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petro-
leum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of
blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Wiper Service Position
If it is necessary to lift the blade from the windshield (In the
event of snow or blade replacement) Proceed as directed:
1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Turn the ignition to the MAR-ON position then to STOP.
3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within two
minutes move the right stalk upward, into the unstable
(“anti-panic”) position, for at least half of a second. The
windshield wiper then executes part of a stroke; at each
command, approximately 1/3 of a normal wiper stroke is
triggered.
NOTE:
The previous operation can be repeated up to three times. In
order to move the blades to the most suitable position.
4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed with the
required operation.
5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in contact with
the windshield.
6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position, turning the
ignition to MAR-ON.
NOTE:
Do not operate the wiper with the blades lifted from the
windshield.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or
if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have
an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, dete-
riorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrica-
tion or oil change. Replace as required.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventu-
ally poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety
Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass
or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and
may seriously reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the
event of engine malfunction, particularly involving
engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance,
have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
(Continued)
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing,
or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or
malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized
dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accu-
mulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face
of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRES-
SURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the
radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan
starts automatically and may start at any time, whether
the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at
any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly.
Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe
internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032),
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with
the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene
glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene
glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended
maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level
of protection against freezing according to the tempera-
tures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant
(antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will
return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The image on the coolant system pressure cap is a
reminder that the radiator contains hot engine
coolant under pressure.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do
not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or
allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean
up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method
for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) in the bottle should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” marks.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no
need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless
checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be
added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over-
heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not
remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or
under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified
for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may
result.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of
operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of
the engine compartment. This is normally a result of mois-
ture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens,
allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely
driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter oper-
ation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the
correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsat-
isfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor
gas mileage, and increased emissions.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on
the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Speci-
fications” for further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The proper type
of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in
a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder
reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpect-
edly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Power Steering Fluid
Check the fluid level with the vehicle on flat ground and
engine cold. Fluid should be between MIN and MAX refer-
ences on the reservoir body.
The level may go over the MAX line when oil is hot.
If topping off is required, make sure the oil you use is
approved. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Power steering fluid consumption is very low. If you need to
top off your fluid often and multiple times, have your system
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure
optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid spec-
ifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid
at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged,
causing partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Because it is flammable, do not allow the power steering
fluid to come into contact with hot engine parts
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmis-
sion. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust
the fluid level accurately.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the
factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the
vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated
(with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Upfitter Connectors — If Equipped
The preparation connectors are to be only used by upfitters .
This connector is located under the dash
Connector Location
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
15 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View
Connector Pin Numbers
Upfitter Connector
PIN Function
1 Not Connected
2 Alternator System Charging In Process Signal
3 Vehicle Speed Repetition (VSO)
4 Not Connected
5 Not Connected
6 Not Connected
7 Additional Courtesy Light
8 Courtesy Lights Negative Control (Dimmed)
9 Not Connected
10 Not Connected
11 Not Connected
12 Not Connected
13 Power Supply At Key On (+Ignition)
14 Not Connected
15 Not Connected
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when the vehicle is
ordered with the applicable package.
2 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View
Connector Pins
Upfitter Connector
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when the vehicle is
ordered with the applicable package.
For additional questions about these connectors as well as
general technical questions about upfitting your Ram
product, refer to https://www.ramtrucks.com/
ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html/ or call 1
(866)-205-4102.
PIN Function
A Power Supply
B GND
CAUTION!
The maximum current load allowed is 15 amps for
continuous use.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an
authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the
tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the
same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that
are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on US design standards
and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the side-
wall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain oper-
ating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions
(i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on
one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the
tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is
approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was
manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare
tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recom-
mended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard
in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle
weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not
be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” chapter of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined
weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight refer-
enced here.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with
varying seating configurations and number and size of
occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and
may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity
of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satis-
factory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are
affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety
• Fuel Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or
over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage
that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's
side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold
tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of
outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tempera-
ture changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions
are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-
taining correct tire inflation pressure is very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (side-
wall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at
continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and addi-
tional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experi-
enced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately
with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run
Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities
and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed after driving
with underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM
sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under
Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a
flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring” in the “Safety” chapter for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher,
and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rota-
tion of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little expo-
sure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil,
grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear
and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when replacement
is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indica-
tors” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
tion placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the orig-
inal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may have
on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling,
and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating
other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and
stress to steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If
your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient tempera-
tures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice
or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “moun-
tain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was
originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be
operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than
that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires;
therefore, local laws should be checked before using these
tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare
tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Refer to “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting And
Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your
vehicle at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conven-
tional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is
designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conven-
tional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is
designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This
tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or
rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs
to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and
reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment
tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and rein-
stall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome
plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild
(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to
always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc.,
and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe
away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.
They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps
keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended
period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive
your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water drop-
lets from the brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration
when braking.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are
not recommended.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rota-
tion will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and
wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance
intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD
SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a
regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross” shown
in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not
apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle's battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees
and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive
to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes
your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance
built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
• Stone and gravel impact
• Insects, tree sap and tar
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in
the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap,
and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint
finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the
doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have
your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well pack-
aged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or
stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as
steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal
and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
NOTE:
Power washing is not allowed inside the vehicle (both
passenger and cargo area).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must
be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many
are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas
they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act
as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original
condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and
FCA recommends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
7
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 293
294
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left
front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the
windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle frame
and underbody as well as the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 294
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 295
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems.
If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function. However,
there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation
of the “Brake System Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated
brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still
function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle
will be much greater than that required with the power
system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only an authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
8
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 295
296 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully
engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 296
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 297
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
All available gasoline engines are designed to meet
all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using high quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having a octane rating of 87
using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause
for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gaso-
line with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine
failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly
blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
8
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 297
298 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not
be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a
manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into
some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with
MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline
of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended
with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions
system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated
on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gaso-
line retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is
prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 298
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 299
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a
higher level of detergents to further aide in mini-
mizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to over-
heat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some
light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel
system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting
from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 299
300 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage,
and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 300
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 301
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
8
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 301
302 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395
such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 302
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 303
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any
“globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhib-
itors or antirust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 303
304 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4.
The fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage
intervals do not apply.
Power Steering Reservoir
Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting FCA Material Standard
MS-11655.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 304
305
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features
to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle soft-
ware technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US
LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appro-
priate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your systems or to
reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of
vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 305
306 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the
potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html (US Residents) or www.driveu-
connect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept informa-
tion and private communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many features
can vary by vehicle.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of
unknown origin could possibly contain malicious soft-
ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase
the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior,
take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 306
MULTIMEDIA 307
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be equipped such
as Language, Display, Units (if equipped), Voice, Clock,
Safety & Driving Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors &
Locks, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone (if equipped), Siri-
usXM® Setup (if equipped), Radio Setup, Restore Settings,
and Clear Personal Data.
NOTE:
• Only one category may be selected at a time.
• The Back Arrow will change into a Done button if any
changes are made.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
press and release the preferred setting. Once the setting is
complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touch-
screen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to
return to the Main Settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the avail-
able settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 307
308 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language English/Français/Español
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español) for all
display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button
on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected.
Display Mode Manual Auto
Brightness With Headlights ON With Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the “Brightness” setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" positions.
Units — If Equipped US Metric
NOTE:
When selecting the “Units” setting, the changes can be made to the Distance (mi, km), Fuel Consumption (MPG if set to mi,
L/100 km or km/L if set to km), and Temperature (°C, °F).
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Display Trip B On Off
NOTE:
Press the relevant button to activate/deactivate the displaying of the Trip B on the instrument cluster display.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 308
MULTIMEDIA 309
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Units — If Equipped
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
NOTE:
This setting will display the possible options while in a voice session.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), L/100 km, or km/L],
and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measurement independently (if equipped).
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 309
310 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time And Format
— If Equipped
12 hrs 24 hrs AM PM
Show Time Status —
If Equipped
On Off
Set Date Day Month Year
NOTE:
By selecting this setting, the day, month, and year can be updated. The selectable days range from 1–31 (depending on
month). The selectable months consist of Jan/Feb/March/April/May/June/July/Aug/Sept/Oct/Nov/Dec. You can also
set the hours and minutes on the clock.
Sync Time — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When this setting is selected, the time will set automatically based upon GPS location.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 310
MULTIMEDIA 311
Safety/Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights — If Equipped
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image for up
to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is
only available if allowed by law in the country of vehicle purchase.
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 311
312 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks — If Equipped
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay — If
Equipped
0 min 20 min
NOTE:
When this Setting is selected, the radio will remain off for the selected amount of time when the engine has been shut off.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 312
MULTIMEDIA 313
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/
Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired
setting.
Balance/Fade — If
Equipped
Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” (if equipped) of the audio by using the Arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound level of the right and left side speakers. Press the “Speaker Icon” on the touchscreen to reset
the balance to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 313
314 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Auto-On Radio — If
Equipped
On Off Recall Last
NOTE:
Press the Auto-On Radio button on the touchscreen to set how the radio behaves when the ignition is switched to ON/RUN.
AUX Volume Offset + –
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The Auto Play feature allows a media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make your selection,
press the On or Off buttons to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones/Devices List of Paired Phones/Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 314
MULTIMEDIA 315
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that
current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience
of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude unde-
sirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio.
Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information
screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen
or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 315
316 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. Once the
settings are restored, a pop-up appears stating "settings reset to default." Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 316
MULTIMEDIA 317
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the switch
will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right-hand control to
select the source (AM, FM, SiriusXM®, USB, AUX).
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control will
tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in
the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 317
318 MULTIMEDIA
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB Input and Auxiliary Jack is located on the instrument
panel below the Climate Controls. This feature allows an iPod® or
external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.
USB Input And AUX Jack
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, iPod nano®, 5G
iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit
Apple’s® website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED
Ram Telematics is designed to help improve safety, effi-
ciency, and productivity. It gives you complete visibility of
your fleet options, whether from behind a desk or on a
mobile device while you are on the go. You can log-in to view
near real-time and historical activity, including location,
vehicle health, and driver performance.
Activating Ram Telematics In Your Vehicles
Before you get started you will need:
• The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) of each vehicle
you want to activate.
• Your main user’s log-in and password; new customers will
be asked to register.
• If you are a new customer, you will need company credit
card information or invoice number as further proof of
customer identification. Don’t worry, you will not be
charged.
• Go to activate.verizonconnect.com/ram/#login. If you are
an existing Verizon Connect customer, enter your
company’s log-in credentials. New customers will need to
register to create a new account.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 318
MULTIMEDIA 319
• Manually enter the VIN(s) or upload a CSV file with your
VINs. A vehicle name is optional and can be added later.
Follow online instructions to complete your vehicle entry.
• Create a password and enter billing information. An email
will be sent to you to complete the final step. After that,
you will be ready to log-in and access Verizon Connect
Fleet!
• You are good to go! You will receive an email confirming
your vehicles are now online.
For more information, or to learn more, visit www.verizon-
connect.com/ram/.
Ram Telematics General Information
Modification Statement
Magneti Marelli has not approved any changes or modifica-
tions to this device by the user. Any changes or modifications
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Magneti Marelli n'approuve aucune modification apportée à
l'appareil par l'utilisateur, quelle qu'en soit la nature. Tout
changement ou modification peuvent annuler le droit d'util-
isation de l'appareil par l'utilisateur.
Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15, 22, 24, and 27 of the FCC
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This
device may not cause interference, and(2) This device must
accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence.L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-
antes:(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et(2)
l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le broulliage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
RF Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation expo-
sure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The
antenna should be installed and operated with minimum
distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 319
320 MULTIMEDIA
Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux
rayonnements de la IC pour environnement non contrôlé.
L'antenne doit être installé de façon à garder une distance
minmale de 20 centimètres entre la source de rayonnements
et votre corps.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relo-
cating the mobile phone. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the phone, it is recommended
that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found
in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations,
which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless
radios may be restricted in some situations or environments,
such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions,
you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 320
MULTIMEDIA 321
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 321
322 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you
need to know to control your Uconnect system.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversa-
tions are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the dome
lamp and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by
pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push To MUTE
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
3 — Push To End Call
4 — Push To Begin Using Uconnect Voice Recognition
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 322
MULTIMEDIA 323
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point
while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recogni-
tion system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV VR
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 323
324 MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription
or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to
learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say
Help. The system provides you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Radio
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 324
MULTIMEDIA 325
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth® and Auxil-
iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for
connected USB and iPod® devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist.
• “Change source to Bluetooth®”
• “Change source to iPod®”
• “Change source to USB”
• “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the
music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Media
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 325
326 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated for the
Uconnect system, your system is ready. Check Uconnect-
Phone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the VR button or Phone button (if enabled). After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
• “Call John Smith”
• “Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the VR button or
Phone button (if enabled) and say “Call,” then pronounce
the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John
Smith work.”
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Phone
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 326
MULTIMEDIA 327
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
VR button or Phone button (if enabled) and say Listen.
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect
system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
VR button or Phone button (if enabled). After the beep,
say... “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
* Only use the numbering listed. Otherwise, the system will
not transpose the message.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this
feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <5, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30, 45, 60>
minutes late.*
Call me. Are you there yet?
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <5, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30, 45,
60> of minutes.*
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
9
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 327
328 MULTIMEDIA
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Ucon-
nect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is
a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android™ is a trademark of
Google Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• US residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 328
329
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can
often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific
work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done
that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor
know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle
by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service
advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many autho-
rized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal
daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make
these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's
authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
10
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 329
330 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this
process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 330
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 331
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manu-
facturer has installed special Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a
TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufac-
turer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's
service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an
Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of
the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the
service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian resi-
dents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract
that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufac-
turer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract
that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require
service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
10
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 331
332 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when
you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also
made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership
experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to
resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information online for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its
best.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained
in vehicles and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 332
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 333
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should imme-
diately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the informa-
tion that students and professional technicians need in diag-
nosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete
working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or compo-
nents is written in straightforward language with illustra-
tions, diagrams, and charts.
10
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 333
334 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts, and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct prob-
lems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting,
operating, emergency, and maintenance procedures as well
as specifications, capabilities, and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (US)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (US)
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 334
335
INDEX
A
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................................256
Additives, Fuel ........................................................................299
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation...............................................................124
Driver Knee Air Bag ...........................................................125
Enhanced Accident Response ...................................131, 240
Event Data Recorder (EDR)...............................................240
Front Air Bag .......................................................................122
If Deployment Occurs ........................................................130
Knee Impact Bolsters ..........................................................124
Maintaining Your Air Bag System....................................132
Maintenance.........................................................................132
Transporting Pets................................................................153
Air Bag Light .....................................................................84, 154
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ................250
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............................................251
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ..................................................251
Air Conditioner System .........................................................251
Air Conditioning Filter ............................................................59
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................................57, 59
Air Filter ...................................................................................250
Air Pressure
Tires.......................................................................................277
Alarm
Security Alarm.......................................................................21
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.....................................................................................12
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..........................................256, 301
Disposal ................................................................................258
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...............................................97
Anti-Lock Warning Light.........................................................88
Assist, Hill Start.......................................................................101
Audio Systems (Radio)...........................................................305
Auto Down Power Windows ..................................................61
Auto Up Power Windows .......................................................61
Automatic Transmission................................................163, 164
Adding Fluid................................................................263, 304
Fluid And Filter Change ....................................................263
Fluid Change........................................................................263
Fluid Level Check........................................................261, 262
Fluid Type ....................................................................261, 304
Special Additives.................................................................262
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)............................70
Axle Fluid.................................................................................304
11
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 335
336
B
Battery.................................................................................86, 247
Charging System Light.........................................................86
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ............................................15
Belts, Seat .................................................................................154
Body Builders Guide ................................................................12
Body Mechanism Lubrication...............................................252
B-Pillar Location......................................................................272
Brake Assist System..................................................................98
Brake Fluid...............................................................................304
Brake System ...................................................................260, 295
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................................................................97
Fluid Check..................................................................260, 304
Master Cylinder...................................................................260
Parking..................................................................................161
Warning Light .......................................................................85
Brake, Parking .........................................................................161
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..............................................164
Bulb Replacement ...................................................................200
Bulbs, Light......................................................................156, 200
C
Camera, Rear ...........................................................................179
Capacities, Fluid......................................................................301
Caps, Filler
Fuel........................................................................................181
Oil (Engine)..................................................................245, 249
Power Steering.....................................................................171
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)...............................................257
Car Washes ..............................................................................291
Carbon Monoxide Warning...........................................153, 300
Cargo Area Cover .....................................................................66
Cargo Area Features.................................................................66
Cargo Compartment.................................................................66
Cargo Tie-Downs ......................................................................66
Cellular Phone .........................................................................320
Certification Label...................................................................182
Chains, Tire ..............................................................................287
Changing A Flat Tire ......................................................212, 266
Chart, Tire Sizing ....................................................................268
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)..............95
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety........................................153
Checks, Safety..........................................................................153
Child Restraint.........................................................................133
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................................................137
Child Seat Installation.................................................147, 151
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .........................144
Infant And Child Restraints...............................................136
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ...................................142
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .....................139
Older Children And Child Restraints ..............................136
Seating Positions..................................................................138
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 336
337
Clean Air Gasoline..................................................................297
Cleaning
Wheels...................................................................................285
Climate Control.........................................................................53
Cold Weather Operation........................................................158
Compact Spare Tire ................................................................283
Contract, Service .....................................................................331
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..................................257
Cooling System .......................................................................255
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze).............................................256
Coolant Level.......................................................................258
Cooling Capacity.................................................................301
Disposal Of Used Coolant..................................................258
Drain, Flush, And Refill .....................................................256
Inspection .....................................................................255, 258
Points To Remember...........................................................259
Pressure Cap ........................................................................257
Radiator Cap........................................................................257
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).....................256, 301, 302
Corrosion Protection ..............................................................290
Cruise Light ...............................................................................93
Cupholders ................................................................................69
Customer Assistance ..............................................................329
Customer Programmable Features.......................................306
Cybersecurity ..........................................................................305
D
Dealer Service ..........................................................................248
Defroster, Windshield ............................................................154
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................................................94
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..........................................................................246
Power Steering.....................................................................171
Disable Vehicle Towing .........................................................238
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............................................258
Door Ajar....................................................................................86
Door Ajar Light .........................................................................86
Door Locks .................................................................................22
Doors...........................................................................................22
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..............................................................29
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water.....................................................197
E
Electric Brake Control System.................................................98
Electric Remote Mirrors ...........................................................41
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)...........................70
Electronic Range Select (ERS)................................................170
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)...........................................99
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...........................86
11
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 337
338
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck..............................................237
Jacking ..........................................................................212, 266
Jump Starting.......................................................................231
Towing..................................................................................238
Emission Control System Maintenance.................................95
Engine.......................................................................................245
Air Cleaner...........................................................................250
Block Heater.........................................................................159
Break-In Recommendations ..............................................160
Checking Oil Level..............................................................246
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........................................................302
Cooling .................................................................................255
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................................................153, 300
Fails To Start ........................................................................158
Flooded, Starting.................................................................158
Jump Starting.......................................................................231
Oil ..........................................................................248, 301, 302
Oil Filler Cap................................................................245, 249
Oil Filter................................................................................250
Oil Selection .................................................................249, 301
Oil Synthetic.........................................................................249
Overheating .........................................................................234
Starting..................................................................................157
Engine Oil Viscosity ...............................................................249
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................................................249
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........................131, 240
Ethanol......................................................................................297
Exhaust Gas Cautions.....................................................153, 300
Exhaust System................................................................153, 253
Exterior Lights ...................................................................43, 156
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................................................................250
Air Conditioning ...................................................................59
Engine Oil.....................................................................250, 302
Engine Oil Disposal ............................................................250
Flashers
Hazard Warning..................................................................199
Turn Signals ...................................................................92, 156
Flooded Engine Starting.........................................................158
Fluid Capacities.......................................................................301
Fluid Leaks...............................................................................156
Fluid Level Checks
Brake......................................................................................260
Engine Oil.............................................................................246
Power Steering.....................................................................171
Fluid, Brake..............................................................................304
Fluids And Lubricants............................................................302
Fog Lights...................................................................................45
Fold-Flat Seats ...........................................................................29
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .....................................................199
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 338
339
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle.........................................................237
Fuel............................................................................................297
Additives..............................................................................299
Clean Air ..............................................................................297
Ethanol..................................................................................297
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...........................................................181
Gasoline................................................................................297
Materials Added..................................................................299
Methanol...............................................................................297
Octane Rating ..............................................................297, 302
Specifications .......................................................................302
Tank Capacity......................................................................301
Fuses .........................................................................................206
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap).......................................................181
Gasoline, (Fuel) .......................................................................297
Gasoline, Clean Air.................................................................297
Gasoline, Reformulated .........................................................297
Gear Ranges.............................................................................165
Gear Selector Override...........................................................236
Glass Cleaning.........................................................................293
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................................183, 185
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ........................................183, 184
Guide
Body Builders ........................................................................12
GVWR.......................................................................................183
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water...............................................197
Hazard Warning Flashers......................................................199
Head Restraints .........................................................................34
Headlights
Cleaning................................................................................290
Passing ....................................................................................44
Switch......................................................................................43
Heated Seats...............................................................................32
Heater, Engine Block ..............................................................159
Hill Start Assist........................................................................101
Hitches
Trailer Towing .....................................................................187
Holder, Cup ...............................................................................69
Hood Prop..................................................................................64
Hood Release .............................................................................64
I
Ignition........................................................................................17
Key.....................................................................................13, 17
Switch......................................................................................17
Ignition Key Removal...............................................................17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key).........................................................19
Inside Rearview Mirror............................................................38
Instrument Cluster..............................................................75, 76
11
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 339
340
Descriptions ...........................................................................92
Display....................................................................................77
Display Controls....................................................................77
Engine Oil Reset ....................................................................80
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..........................................292
Interior And Instrument Lights ..............................................46
Interior Appearance Care ......................................................292
Interior Lights............................................................................46
Introduction...............................................................................10
iPod Control.............................................................................318
iPod/USB/MP3 Control........................................................318
Bluetooth Streaming Audio...............................................318
J
Jack Location............................................................................212
Jack Operation.................................................................212, 266
Jacking And Tire Changing...................................................212
Jump Starting...........................................................................231
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...................................16
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry).................15
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ..................16
Key-In Reminder.......................................................................18
Keys.............................................................................................13
Replacement...........................................................................19
Sentry (Immobilizer).............................................................19
L
Lane Change Assist...................................................................45
Lap/Shoulder Belts.................................................................111
Latches ......................................................................................156
Hood........................................................................................64
Leaks, Fluid..............................................................................156
Life Of Tires .............................................................................280
Light Bulbs .......................................................................156, 200
Lights ........................................................................................156
Air Bag ............................................................................84, 154
Brake Assist Warning .........................................................100
Brake Warning.......................................................................85
Bulb Replacement................................................................200
Cruise ......................................................................................93
Daytime Running..................................................................43
Engine Temperature Warning.............................................87
Exterior............................................................................43, 156
Hazard Warning Flasher....................................................199
Headlights ..............................................................................43
Interior ....................................................................................46
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)...............................91
Park....................................................................................44, 93
Passing ....................................................................................44
Seat Belt Reminder................................................................88
Service...................................................................................200
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS).....................................103
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 340
341
Traction Control ..................................................................100
Turn Signals ...................................................................92, 156
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions..................87, 92
Loading Vehicle ..............................................................182, 184
Capacities .............................................................................184
Tires.......................................................................................272
Locks
Power Door ............................................................................22
Low Tire Pressure System .....................................................103
Lubrication, Body ...................................................................252
Lug Nuts/Bolts .......................................................................295
M
Maintenance Free Battery ......................................................247
Maintenance Schedule ...........................................................241
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)..................91, 95
Manual
Service...................................................................................333
Master Cylinder
Brakes....................................................................................260
Methanol ..................................................................................297
Mirrors........................................................................................38
Electric Powered....................................................................41
Electric Remote......................................................................41
Exterior Folding.....................................................................40
Outside ...................................................................................39
Rearview.................................................................................38
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.....................................................................................12
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..............................................103
Mopar Parts..............................................................................332
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period................................................160
O
Occupant Restraints................................................................108
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)......................................297, 302
Oil Change Indicator ................................................................80
Reset ........................................................................................80
Oil Filter, Change ....................................................................250
Oil Filter, Selection..................................................................250
Oil Pressure Light .....................................................................87
Oil Reset......................................................................................80
Oil, Engine........................................................................248, 302
Capacity................................................................................301
Change Interval ...................................................................248
Checking...............................................................................246
Dipstick.................................................................................246
Disposal ................................................................................250
Filter ..............................................................................250, 302
Filter Disposal......................................................................250
Identification Logo..............................................................249
Materials Added To ............................................................250
Pressure Warning Light .......................................................87
11
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 341
342
Recommendation ........................................................249, 301
Synthetic ...............................................................................249
Viscosity .......................................................................249, 301
Onboard Diagnostic System....................................................94
Operating Precautions..............................................................94
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual............................................................11, 333
Outside Rearview Mirrors.......................................................39
Overheating, Engine...............................................................234
P
Paint Care.................................................................................290
Parking Brake ..........................................................................161
ParkSense System, Rear .........................................................175
Passing Light .............................................................................44
Personal Settings.....................................................................306
Pets............................................................................................153
Placard, Tire And Loading Information..............................272
Power
Mirrors....................................................................................41
Steering.................................................................................171
Windows ................................................................................60
Power Steering Fluid ..............................................................304
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts..........................................116
Preparation For Jacking .................................................212, 217
Pretensioners
Seat Belts...............................................................................117
R
Radial Ply Tires .......................................................................278
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)..................................257
Radio Operation......................................................................320
Rear Camera.............................................................................179
Rear ParkSense System ..........................................................175
Recreational Towing...............................................................195
Reformulated Gasoline...........................................................297
Refrigerant................................................................................251
Release, Hood ............................................................................64
Reminder, Seat Belt.................................................................109
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...................................16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .............................317
Replacement Bulbs..................................................................200
Replacement Keys.....................................................................19
Replacement Tires...................................................................280
Reporting Safety Defects........................................................333
Restraints, Child......................................................................133
Restraints, Head ........................................................................34
Rotation, Tires..........................................................................287
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.................................................154
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle..............................................156
Safety Defects, Reporting.......................................................333
Safety Information, Tire .........................................................266
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 342
343
Safety Tips................................................................................153
Safety, Exhaust Gas ................................................................153
Schedule, Maintenance ..........................................................241
Seat Belts ..........................................................................109, 154
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................................................115
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..........................115
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage...................115
Child Restraints...................................................................133
Energy Management Feature ............................................117
Front Seat..............................................................109, 111, 113
Inspection .............................................................................154
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...........................................113
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........................................114
Lap/Shoulder Belts.............................................................111
Operating Instructions .......................................................113
Pregnant Women.................................................................116
Pretensioners........................................................................117
Rear Seat ...............................................................................111
Reminder........................................................................88, 109
Seat Belt Pretensioner.........................................................117
Untwisting Procedure ........................................................114
Seats ............................................................................................29
Adjustment.............................................................................29
Heated.....................................................................................32
Rear Folding...........................................................................29
Tilting......................................................................................29
Security Alarm...........................................................................21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .........................................302
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).........................................................19
Service Assistance ...................................................................329
Service Contract.......................................................................331
Service Manuals ......................................................................333
Shift Lever Override ...............................................................236
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ....................................................164
Shoulder Belts..........................................................................111
Signals, Turn ......................................................................92, 156
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................................................287
Snow Tires................................................................................282
Spare Tires........................................................................283, 285
Spark Plugs ..............................................................................302
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline).....................................................................302
Oil ..........................................................................................302
Speed Control
Cancel....................................................................................175
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............................................172
Starting......................................................................................157
Automatic Transmission ....................................................157
Cold Weather .......................................................................158
Engine Fails To Start ...........................................................158
Steering.......................................................................................38
11
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 343
344
Power ....................................................................................171
Tilt Column............................................................................38
Wheel, Tilt ..............................................................................38
Steering Wheel Audio Controls............................................317
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls.............317
Storage........................................................................................68
Storage, Vehicle.................................................................58, 289
Storing Your Vehicle ..............................................................289
Sun Visor Extension..................................................................42
Sway Control, Trailer .............................................................102
Synthetic Engine Oil...............................................................249
T
Telescoping Steering Column .................................................38
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ..........................................................66
Tilt Steering Column ................................................................38
Tire And Loading Information Placard...............................272
Tire Markings ..........................................................................266
Tire Safety Information ..........................................................266
Tire Service Kit ........................................................................227
Tires...................................................................156, 276, 283, 288
Aging (Life Of Tires)...........................................................280
Air Pressure .........................................................................276
Chains ...................................................................................287
Changing ......................................................................212, 266
Compact Spare.....................................................................283
General Information ...................................................276, 283
High Speed...........................................................................278
Inflation Pressure ................................................................277
Jacking...........................................................................212, 266
Life Of Tires..........................................................................280
Load Capacity..............................................................272, 273
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .........................89, 103
Quality Grading...................................................................288
Radial ....................................................................................278
Replacement.........................................................................280
Rotation.................................................................................287
Safety.............................................................................266, 276
Sizes.......................................................................................268
Snow Tires............................................................................282
Spare Tires....................................................................283, 285
Spinning................................................................................279
Trailer Towing .....................................................................191
Tread Wear Indicators........................................................280
Wheel Nut Torque...............................................................295
To Open Hood...........................................................................64
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight............................................188
Towing......................................................................................184
Disabled Vehicle..................................................................238
Guide.....................................................................................188
Recreational..........................................................................195
Weight...................................................................................188
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..............................................195
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 344
345
Traction.....................................................................................196
Traction Control ......................................................................102
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...................................................102
Trailer Towing.........................................................................184
Cooling System Tips...........................................................194
Hitches..................................................................................187
Minimum Requirements....................................................189
Tips........................................................................................193
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............................................188
Wiring ...................................................................................192
Trailer Towing Guide.............................................................188
Trailer Weight..........................................................................188
Transmission............................................................................164
Automatic.............................................................163, 164, 261
Fluid ......................................................................................304
Maintenance.........................................................................261
Transporting Pets....................................................................153
Tread Wear Indicators............................................................280
Trip Computer...........................................................................83
Turn Signals...............................................................................92
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings..................................................................15
Uconnect Voice Command ....................................................322
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................................................288
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...........................................114
V
Vehicle Certification Label.....................................................182
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..................................294
Vehicle Loading.......................................................182, 184, 273
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.........................................12
Vehicle Storage ..................................................................58, 289
Viscosity, Engine Oil...............................................................249
Voice Recognition System (VR) ............................................322
11
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 345
346
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions).............92
Warnings And Cautions ..........................................................12
Warranty Information ............................................................332
Washers, Windshield .......................................................50, 246
Washing Vehicle .....................................................................291
Water
Driving Through .................................................................197
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .................................................285
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .................................................285
Wind Buffeting ..........................................................................63
Window Fogging ......................................................................58
Windows ....................................................................................60
Power ......................................................................................60
Windshield Defroster .............................................................154
Windshield Washers.................................................................50
Fluid ......................................................................................246
Windshield Wiper Blades ......................................................252
Windshield Wipers ...........................................................50, 246
Wipers Blade Replacement....................................................252
Wrecker Towing......................................................................238
2020_RAM_PROMASTER_CITY_OM_USA=GUID-7B6A7FCA-79B0-423F-95C5-ED2A949C3D13=1=en=.book Page 346
Printed in the U.S.A.
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Ram e
st une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2020
RAM PROMASTER CITY
RAM promaster city
2020
20_VM_OM_EN_USC
RAM PROMASTER CITY
FIRST Edition
Owner’s Manual
